2014 Dodge Challenger Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2014-challenger

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 539

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2014 Challenger

Challenger

2014
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
14D491-126-AC

Third Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name Chrysler
Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never
drink and then drive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

SECTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 INTRODUCTION

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 5

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.

VIN Location

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2

CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .28

▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .29

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .53

䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .54

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .65
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96

. . .97
. . .97
. . .98
. . .99

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.

The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature

If this vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enterfeature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
N-Go™, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Operating” for further information.
(EVIC) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/
ACC/RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.

Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4

— OFF
— ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the Vehicle Security Alarm armed, will result in the alarm
sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery
is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm or press the Start/Stop button to disarm
the security alarm.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
on the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull Remove the Start/Stop button (if equipped), place the
the key out with your other hand.
shift lever in PARK or place the manual transmission in
REVERSE and apply the parking brake. Turn the Key Fob
to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. Refer
to “Starting And Operating/Starting Procedures” for
further information on removing the Start/Stop button.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ system, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.

Emergency Key Removal

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof — if equipped, and ignition-powered power outlets
will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either
door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
(CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.

WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission in REVERSE, and remove the
Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving the
vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
opening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition
switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posiing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. In addition, if the light begins to
information.
flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
SENTRY KEY®
an invalid Key Fob to start the engine. If the light remains
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau- on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The with the electronics. This condition will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
The system uses a Key Fob with factory-mated Remote seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. as possible by an authorized dealer.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.

• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.

All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authocannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
Replacement Keys

blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
performed at an authorized dealer.
and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
General Information
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the folsubject to the following conditions:
lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
• This device must accept any interference that may be instrument cluster will flash.
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
And Operating⬙ for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

NOTE: The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
the following methods:
To Disarm The System

• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm
the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
alarm will sound.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
information).
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button • The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
previously described arming sequences has occurred,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of
key to the ON position.
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furyour absence, the horn will sound three times and the ther information.
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
Security System Manual Override
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Tamper Alert

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the NOTE:
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
button while still holding the LOCK button.
Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument panel” for further information. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressrefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
mitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
the Key Fob removed.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitbutton while still holding the UNLOCK button.
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
the Key Fob removed.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inThe time for this feature is programmable. Refer to
formation.
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- • When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps:
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transTo Lock The Doors
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitholding the LOCK button.
ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock

and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry), 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressrefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob
removed.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
To Open The Trunk

the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.

Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two NOTE:
times within five seconds to open the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry),
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
and horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
by the system.
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
Using The Panic Alarm

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.

Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
“gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitter
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
operation.
apply.
See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
General Information
Transmitter Battery Replacement

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE ransmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
• Shift lever in PARK
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

• Doors closed
• Hood closed

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Hazard switch off
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

WARNING! (Continued)

• RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)

• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode

WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)

Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

NOTE:

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle

• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
then shut down 10 seconds later.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
Remote Start mode.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Start request.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
third cycle.
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

Cancel Remote Start

• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the occur:
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- • Any engine warning lights come on
Go™ feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On”
will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. • Low Fuel Light turns on
Once inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display • The hood is opened
in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN.
• The hazard switch is pressed
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will • The shift lever is moved out of PARK
display in the EVIC until you push the START button. • The brake pedal is pressed

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.

WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.

Door Lock Knob
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition,
and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
through your EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings” for additional 4. The driver door is opened.
information.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming

NOTE:

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerPersonal Settings (Customer-Programmable FeaProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Intures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
strument Panel” for further information.
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
in accordance with local laws.
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reKEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
sponse time.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
alarm.
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Underunlocked.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk:
Transmitter In Vehicle
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a of the deck lid, press the button on the located on the
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the center of the light bar which is located on the deck lid
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door above the license plate.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Trunk Passive Entry Button

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.

Do NOT Grab The handle When Locking

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
Power Windows
door. The window controls will operate only when the
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the door windows.
NOTE:
WINDOWS

• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Power Window Switches

• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.

To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped

Wind Buffeting
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down fea- Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
ture. Press the window switch to the second detent, pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
release, and the window will go down automatically.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
one window open, then open the other window to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.

NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the button will operate.

TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.

Trunk Release
Button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Trunk Release button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or
by using the external release switch
located on the underside of the
decklid overhang. The release feature will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will display until the trunk is closed.

WARNING! (Continued)
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Trunk Emergency Release
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the
WARNING!
glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching
mechanism.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for
the driver and front outboard passenger
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event

Some of the most important safety features in your
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all passengers
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
item in a seat — if equipped
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
WARNING!
possible.
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
facing infant seat.
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for • Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
CHildren (LATCH).
vehicle with a rear seat.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
their arm.
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.

WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.

(Continued)

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the
Latch Plate
belt is routed through the seat web guide. When the
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
belt is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
plate will contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the
latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go
around your lap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snug.
Latch Plate To Buckle

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.

belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the
belt in a collision.

WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracabdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if
it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Removing Slack From Belt

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. shoulder belt.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

First Row
Second Row

Driver
N/A
ALR

Center
N/A
ALR

Passenger
ALR
ALR

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of • N/A — Not Applicable
the latch plate.
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
folded webbing.
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.

WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest.
(BeltAlert®)
Energy Management Feature

Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster

This vehicle is equipped with a driver and/front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver
or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
Advanced Air Bags.
the outboard side of the front seats.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Side • Steering Wheel and Column
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver,
• Instrument Panel
front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The
SABIC air bags are located above the side windows and • Knee Impact Bolsters
their covers are labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)

SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.

(Continued)

SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Knee Impact Bolsters

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as
required, depending on several factors, including the
severity and type of impact.

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addidriver and front passengers, and position front occupants
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
Bags.
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colliOccupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system the other hand, depending on the type and location of
required for this vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
severe initial deceleration.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
type of collision.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
Light in the instrument panel for approxiover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
have deployed.
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliturns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
away from an inflating air bag.
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruthe air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units

are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de- During collisions where the impact is confined to a
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
especially applies to children.
it is inflated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
removed.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

Front And Side Impact Sensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events.
changed from IGN ON/RUN to IGN OFF.
Enhanced Accident Response System

If A Deployment Occurs

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
WARNING!
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Bag Warning Light

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the air bag system immediately.
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems percycled to the ON/RUN.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
eight-second interval.
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
as:
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enwere buckled/fastened;
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
crash investigation.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
These data can help provide a better understanding of In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This NOTE:
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• For
additional
information,
refer
to
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canabuckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
website for additional information:
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriversThere are different sizes and types of restraints for
childsafety-index-53.htm
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
WARNING!
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has how strong you are. The child and others could be
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and
Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large
for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants And Child Restraints

WARNING!

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.

• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.

WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint

Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle

•
•

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages?

N/A

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Can the head restraints be removed?

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

LATCH Anchorages

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.

Tether Strap Anchorages

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autodo not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position.
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.

WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.

2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
in any direction.
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
to allow more room for the child seat.
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
ing position.
An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
tions to attach a tether anchor.
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac- all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys
turer’s instructions.
and that they should not play with them.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt

WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?

No
Yes

Yes

Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the car seat.

2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
“click”.
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

strap. Refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
anchor.
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm) in Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 1. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.

Tether Strap Mounting

1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap

A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
the break in period. Add oil as required.
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be SAFETY TIPS
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- Transporting Passengers
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
AREA.

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Defroster
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
system.
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects should be located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .109
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .143 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .143

▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . .161

▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .162

▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . .153
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .159

▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .163
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .168

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .176
. . . . .176
. . . . .177
. . . . .177

䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .171

▫ Enabling/Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . . . . .181

䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .182

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .182

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .194

▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .185

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .195

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .186

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . .186

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .188

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .190

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .193

▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201

▫ Console Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirrors

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.

WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand
toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the
control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
move. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.

Power Mirror Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use Visor
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun Uconnect® PHONE — IF EQUIPPED
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invisor and pull rearward.
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile,”
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
Slide-On-Rod Extender

For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect® Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Voice Command Button

Operation

Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device,” the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth® Device.”
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect® Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry,” or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry.” Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.

To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone

Help Command

To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing.”
connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority
allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234 567 8901.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone

button to begin.

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call.”
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
person you want to call.
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe,” where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob.”
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
NOTE:
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
book entry, if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phonebook entry that you are adding.
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the
button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry.”
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete.”
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete.”
deleted or edited.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect® Phonebook Entries

List All Names In The Uconnect® Phonebook

• Press the

button to begin.

• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All.”
“Phonebook List Names.”
• The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you • The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
butdeleted.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
“Call.”
is deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
operations at this point.
deleted or edited.
• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
The following features can be accessed through the Currently In Progress
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your
button to place the current
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Phone Call Features

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To reject the Progress
call. Press the
button until you hear a single
call, press and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling Conference Call
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
to “Conference Call” in this section.
button until you hear a
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
joined into one conference call.
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To Three-Way Calling
but- To initiate three-way calling, press the
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button while
ton until you hear a single beep.
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress.” After the second call has established,
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatbeep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
one conference call.
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Call Termination
Toggling Between Calls

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on Call Continuation
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
Redial
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
“Redial.”
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duraNOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
Uconnect® Phone.
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• Press the

button to begin.

• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone Features

Emergency Assistance

Language Selection

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:

To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
button to begin.
• Press the
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
language selection.
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
voice commands will be in that language.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and is usable across all languages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

NOTE:

WARNING! (Continued)

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • turned on,
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and • paired to the Uconnect® System,
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may • and have network coverage.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
• If supported, this number may be programmable on If you need roadside assistance:
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
• Press the
button to begin.
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
“Towing Assistance.”
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
NOTE: You should program the desired Towing Assisfor the mobile phone directly.
tance phone number using the Voice Command system.
To do this, press the button and say “Setup,” followed by
WARNING!
“Towing Assistance.” When prompted say 1-800-521To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer- 2779 for U.S./Canada, say 55-14-3454 for Mexico City
gency, your mobile phone must be:
and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems

When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
followed by the word “Send.” For example, if required to
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send.”
can press the
Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
“Send,” is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
to leave a number on a pager.

This method is used in instances where one generally has You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
navigating through an automated telephone system.
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say “Send.” The
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the
system or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
tones over the phone.
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE:
button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • Press the
network configurations. This is normal.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
Phone And Network Status Indicators
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to notification to inform you of your phone and network
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of status when you are attempting to make a phone call
the voice prompt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
button.
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Following the beep, say “Mute.”
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
button.
• Press the
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Advanced Phone Connectivity
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transprogress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
audio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones.”
button
Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
and say “Transfer Call.”
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
being announced, press the
button and say “SeUconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
lect”
or
“Delete.”
Also,
see
the
next
two sections for an
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
alternate
way
to
“Select”
or
“Delete”
a paired phone.
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.

Select Another Mobile Phone

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions debutton to begin.
• Press the
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
you wish to select.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Press the

button to begin.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
prompts.
button at any time while the From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you radio mode):
wish to delete.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training,” This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training,” or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
best results, the Voice Training session should be comoverhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Press the

button.

• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.

Performance is maximized under:
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
• Low-to-medium blower setting
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed

• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.

• Low road noise

• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.

• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition

• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”

NOTE:

• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • Even though international dialing for most number
cents, the system may not always work for some.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:

• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.

• Low-to-medium blower setting

Recent Calls

• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise

If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download,” Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

• Smooth road surface

SMS

• Fully closed windows

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.

• Dry weather conditions, and
• Operation from the driver’s seat.

Read Messages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
not the Uconnect® Phone.
If you wish to hear the new message:
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced • Press the
button.
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

button while the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
• Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” List of Preset Messages:
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
1. Yes
Send Messages:
2. No
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
3. Where are you?
a new message:
4. I need more direction
button.
• Press the
5. L O L
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
6. Why
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say 7. I love you
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
8. Call me
9. Call me later

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?

Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming messages.
button.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.

19. Send number to call

Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.

20. Start without me

Power-Up

17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location

all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu

select phone
send
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
pairing
phone book

return or main menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

select
phone settings or phone
set up

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

General Information

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System
• This device must accept any interference received,
as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel,”
“Help” or “Main Menu.”

These commands are universal and can be used from any
button, you menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a the active application.
command.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few a normal speaking volume.
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
The system will best recognize your speech if the winoptions.
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists set to low.
button, listen for
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your 3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Comcommands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Comsetting for Voice Command is different than the audio
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu.”
mand
system.
Commands
Main Menu
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
main menu.
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
Changing The Volume

• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
button.
• “Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth® Radio FM
Streaming mode)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)

• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)

Radio AM

• “Next Station” (to select the next station)

To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
Satellite Radio
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)

USB Mode

• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)

To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:

• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc Mode

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)

To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
may say the following commands:
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)

• “Next Track” (to play the next track)

• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list an Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo Mode

– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:

– “Delete” (to delete a memo)

– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the Setup
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
one of the following commands:
• “Change to system setup”
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)

• “Main menu system setup”

– “Delete” (to delete the recording)

• “Switch to system setup”

• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — • “Change to setup”
During the playback you may press the Voice Com- • “Main menu setup” or
button to stop playing memos. You promand
• “Switch to setup”
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)

• “Language English”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

• “Language French”

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
• “Language Spanish”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
• “Tutorial”
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re• “Voice Training”
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
SEATS
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.

WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat.

Power Seat Switch

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Power Lumbar Switch

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front driver and passenger seats may be equipped
with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
heaters provide the same average heat level for both the
cushion and the seatback.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum of 60
minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one,
indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-level setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum of 45
minutes.

WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
within two to five minutes.
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.

WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever

Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.

Easy Entry Lever

Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.

The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.

Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
Push Button
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by not in use.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Folding Rear Seat

Folded Rear Seat

When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.

Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

Hood Safety Catch

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

LIGHTS
Headlights And Parking Lights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.

Headlight Switch

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light
and instrument panel light operation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headunlit area.
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
Automatic Headlights Only)
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights
cancel the delay.
(DRL) whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will position, the headlights are off and the parking brake is
released. The headlight switch must be used for normal
turn off in the normal manner.
nighttime driving.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge
(HID) headlights, the front turn signal lamps provide the
feature.
DRL function. If equipped, the DRL will flash when a
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to turn signal is in operation, and return to DRL mode when
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ the turn signal is no longer flashing.
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and
press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch again or turn off the
headlight switch.

Fog Light Operation

An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Multifunction Lever

Turn Signals

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
steering column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
will shut off.
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Map/Reading Lights
Lane Change Assist

These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Flash-To-Pass
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by turned fully upward, past the second detent.
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
High/Low Beam Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is located to the right of the headlight switch. With the parking lights or headlights on,
rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door
handles and cupholders.
Overhead Console

Dome Light Position

Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off position.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
Interior Lights

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever

Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

Mist Feature

CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.

Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.

Intermittent Wiper System

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- spray the windshield with washer fluid.
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the Windshield Washers
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
washer spray is desired.
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
and then resume the intermittent interval previously Automatic Headlights Only)
selected.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
and then turn off.
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.

The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.

To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.

WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.

Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.

Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

3 — SET 4 — CANCEL

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.

WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Activate

To Set A Desired Speed

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Deactivate

The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the U.S. Speed (mph)
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
out erasing the set speed memory.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Resume Speed
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed Metric Speed (km/h)
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
To Vary The Speed Setting
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
the new set speed will be established.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can dethe new set speed will be established.
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed To Accelerate For Passing
To Decrease Speed

of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.

ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in
(150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Park Assist Ready

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Park Assist System Off

Slow Tone

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Fast Tone

Continuous Tone

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The
following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs

Greater than
59 in (150 cm)
None

Radio Volume
Reduced

None

WARNING ALERTS
59-39 in
39-25 in
(150-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes

NOTE: ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast

Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous

2 Slow
Flashing
Yes

1 Slow
Flashing
Yes

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Enabling/Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled through the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the EVIC.
The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and
Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.

Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ message for five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
display the ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ or ⬙WIPE
OFF REAR SENSORS⬙ message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense® will
not operate.

When ParkSense® is disabled, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is
disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in If ⬙WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS⬙appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
REVERSE.
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If ⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ appears in the • When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instruEVIC, see an authorized dealer.
ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam- • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
age the sensors.
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operating properly.
NOTE:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
30 cm from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.

CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console

The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
Courtesy/Reading Lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may At the forward end of the overhead console are two
courtesy/reading lights.
also be included, if equipped.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) console designate the three different HomeLink® chantransmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is nels.
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorHomeLink® Buttons
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEAR- where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
ING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
button may vary by manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
for the channel to train.

Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
release the button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANsteps.
NEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti- For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to before 1995.
complete the training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
the garage door opener/device activates, programprogram.
ming is complete.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button you want to program and the hand - held To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter button.
erase the channels.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
NEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
NOTE:
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
for the channel to train.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
not release the button.
Step 2.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink®
button while you press and release (“cycle”), your
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
hand - held transmitter every two seconds.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transCanadian/Gate Operator Programming

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® NOTE:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
for the channel to train.
time-out in the same manner.
• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
Step 2.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
the device is plugged in and activates, programming is
complete.
2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
program.
programming, plug it back in at this time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

Security

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
follow these steps:
in your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
“CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when
release the button.
the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, press and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.

WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

2. This device must accept any interference that may be The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
received including interference that may cause unde- visors on the overhead console.
sired operation.
NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

Venting Sunroof — Express

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.

Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Sunshade Operation

Sunroof Maintenance

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

CAUTION!

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse.
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Power Outlet

Center Console Power Outlet

The center console power outlet is powered directly from Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the
the battery (power available at all times).
battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel
2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

CUPHOLDERS

Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped

Front Cupholders

The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. They
are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. Refer
to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

Rear Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.

Front Cupholders

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Cupholders

CONSOLE FEATURES

Sliding Console Armrest

Console Storage

The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Volt
The center console armrest slides forward with three
power outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold
detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use
various size coins). The center console may also be
and shifting ease.
equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
Sliding Center Console Armrest

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and
iPhone® devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster

Center Console

The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .208

▫ Sport Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped . .230

䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .210

▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221

▫ Compass Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . .225

▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234

▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .225
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

䡵 Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
䡵 Uconnect® 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . .240
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245

▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play. . . . . .260
▫ INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play . . . . .260
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .265

▫ Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .248

▫ Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266

䡵 Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .249

▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267

▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .249

▫ Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . .271 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .276
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .276
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

▫ Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1
2
3
4
5

— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Compartment
— Radio
— Heated Seat Switch

6 — ESC OFF Switch
7 — Sport Button
8 — Hazard Warning Switch
9 — Heated Steering Wheel Switch
10 — Climate Control

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

11 — Ignition Switch
12 — Trunk Release Button
13 — Headlight Switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge

This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
2. Trip Odometer Button

5. Tachometer

Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.

The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
area.

3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or
turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s
non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly
increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

it means that the charging system is experiencing a vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authoproblem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain rized dealer for service as soon as possible.
service immediately.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting immediate service is required. In this case, you may
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
the light does not come on during starting.
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position. This light will also turn on while 8. Temperature Gauge
the engine is running if there is a problem with the
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperaElectronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperaplace the shift lever in PARK, for manual transmission
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
place the transmission in neutral, apply the parking
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
brake, and cycle the ignition key. The light should turn
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

9. Turn Signal Indicators

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.

10. Air Bag Warning Light

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Vehicle” for further information.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
This light will turn on and a single chime will
engine
running.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Insound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
When this light turns on, the engine temperature is
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
critically hot. Further overheating will cause a continusystem. If this light remains on after several ignition
ous chime will sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
allowed to cool. If the light turns on while driving, safely
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as posproblem diagnosed and corrected.
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

13. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Light — If Equipped
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conmomentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
trol (ESC) is off.
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the 14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
previously.
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the chime will sound when this light turns on.
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
Only

15. High Beam Indicator

This indicator will turn on when the high beam
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
high beam.
automatic transmission.
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light

18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for
additional information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.

20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected.

The EVIC features a driver-interactive display, for further The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacinformation refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
ter (EVIC)”.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumiThis light will flash at a fast rate for approxinates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
until the vehicle is disarmed.
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires.)
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseCAUTION! (Continued)
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operatem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure tion or sensor damage may result when using reas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety placement equipment that is not of the same size,
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
to continue to function properly.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
CAUTION!
on for as long as four seconds.
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
warning have been established for the tire size then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

functioning and service is required. However, the con- start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
ventional brake system will continue to operate normally from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
promptly.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The
OBD system monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.

CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)

WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display which is located in the
instrument cluster.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

This system conveniently allows the driver to select a • Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with Drivervariety of useful information by pressing the switches
Selectable Surround [DSS])
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
The system allows the driver to select information by
following:
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
• System Status
wheel:
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Tire Pressure Monitor System
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect® phone (If Equipped)
• Uconnect® gps Screens (If Equipped)
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons

• Audio Mode Display
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

SELECT Button

MENU Button
Press and release the MENU button to access
the main menu, or to return to the main menu
from the sub-menus.

Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset

UP Button

features.
Press and release the UP button to scroll upElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
ward through the main menus and sub-menus.
Displays
DOWN Button
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll the following messages:
downward through the main menus and • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
sub-menus.
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single •
chime)
•
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
•
• Door Ajar
•
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
•
• Oil Change Required
•
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
•
• Channel # Transmit
•
• Channel # Training
•
• Channel # Trained
•
• Clearing Channels

Channels Cleared
Did Not Train
Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)
Service TPM System (with a single chime)
Tire Pressure Display Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate
Tire to XX”
ESC Off – Electronic Stability Control is deactivated
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped
Check Gascap
Key Fob Battery Low
Service Keyless System
Wrong Key
Damaged Key

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

• Key not Programmed
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key Fob Not Detected
• Press Brake & Push Button to Start

has been reached. This indication notifies the driver that
changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.

• Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the
“Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower
gear.
Starting Your Vehicle”)
The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until
• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
to a situation where changing gear is not required to
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on improve fuel consumption.
vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle Engine Oil Change Indicator System
with an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode.
The GSI provides the driver with a visual indication Oil Change Required
within the EVIC when the recommended gear shift point Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
upon your personal driving style.
OFF/LOCK position.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine.)
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU but2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
within 10 seconds.
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
• Distance To Empty
history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading before
• Trip A
the reset.
• Trip B
• The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above
• Elapsed Time
the average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This
message will appear whenever the Multi• Display Units of Measure in
Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows the
Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are
Trip Computer functions.
driving in a fuel efficient manner.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
Trip Functions

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Fuel Saver Mode–On

Fuel Saver Mode–Off

• This feature allows you to monitor when you are • Distance To Empty (DTE)
driving in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to
• Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance
economy.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

is determined by a weighted average of the instanta- • Trip B
neous and average fuel economy, according to the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be reset through
reset.
the SELECT button.
• Elapsed Time
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display • Display Units of Measure in
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
To Reset The Display
display.
• Trip A

Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
reset.
resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display
during this three-second window.)
Sport Mode
This light will illuminate when the sport mode
is selected. This mode provides performance
based tuning. For further information, refer to
”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N- The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the
Go™ icon momentarily appears in the EVIC display new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition
showing the new ignition switch position.
switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible
by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display
appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- Mode will only be available for video media sources
(DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media supported by
ating” for more information.
the radio).
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But Compass Display — If Equipped
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display MENU Button
always re-appears.
The compass readings indicate the direction
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
Equipped
MENU button until “Compass” displays in the
EVIC.
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides inforNOTE: The system will display the last known outside
mation on the current surround mode.
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated tempera• Stereo
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
• Surround Sound
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
button to change surround modes. The Video Surround
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Automatic Compass Calibration

3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “CALIBRATE
COMPASS” displays in the EVIC.

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
calibration. The message “CAL” will display in the
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
EVIC.
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
“CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass headSettings displays in the EVIC.
ing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
Settings displays in the EVIC.
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “COMPASS
VARIANCE” message and the last variance zone
number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the MENU button to exit.

Compass Variance Map
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)

Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the Up or features when the transmission is in PARK.
DOWN button to display any one of the following Press and release the MENU button until Personal Setchoices.
tings displays in the EVIC.
• Oil Temperature
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
Shows the actual oil temperature.
following choices.
• Oil Pressure

Language

When in this display you may select one of three languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
• Tire Pressure
functions and the Uconnect® gps (if equipped). Press the
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING SELECT button while in this display to select English,
THE SPARE TIRE).
Espanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the selected language.
Shows the actual oil pressure.

NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect® language selection.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both of
When ON is selected, both doors will lock automatically
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.
Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterWhen ON is selected, both doors will unlock when the N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or Unlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
make your selection, press and release the SELECT grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is
grasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is
Remote Key Unlock
programmed touching the handle more than once will
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless first is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE all doors (or use RKE transmitter).
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Remote Start Comfort Sys.

Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”
appears.

Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

Headlamps On With Wipers (Available With Auto
Headlamps Only)
When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“ON” or “OFF” appears.

when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or
“90” appears.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
Operating” for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selecDelay Turning Headlights Off
tion, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Delay Power Off To Accessories Until Exit

Display ECO Mode — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front
vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.

The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
Turn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
When ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig- been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
selection, press and release the SELECT button until
Enable/Disable The Rear Park Assist System
“ON” or “OFF” appears.
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Display Units Of Measure In
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of
measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears.

Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect® 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Uconnect® 130

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect® 130

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
position to operate the radio.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
and radio frequency.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

SEEK Button

AM/FM Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

TIME Button

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.

Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricbutton operates in a similar manner.
tions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.

MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
Playback Of MP3 Files

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
by the following:
MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle’s audio
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
increase with more files and folders
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is ACC position to operate the radio.
OFF).
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.

Uconnect® 130

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
screen.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make TIME Button
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
stations without stopping, until you release it.
and radio frequency.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Voice Command Button Uconnect® Phone — If
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
Equipped
SCROLL control knob.
Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
details.
will begin to blink.
SEEK Buttons

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ RW/FF
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
trol knob to save time change.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the TUNE Control
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
starting at step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above Setting The Tone, Balance And Fade
procedure, starting at step 2.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
INFO Button

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ format types:
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
16-Digit Character
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Program Type
Display
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
No program type or unNone
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
defined
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Adult Hits
Adlt Hit
the front and rear speakers.
Classical
Classicl
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Classic Rock
Cls Rock
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
College
College
MUSIC TYPE Button
Country
Country
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Foreign Language
Language
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

Program Type
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues

16-Digit Character
Display
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B

Program Type
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

16-Digit Character
Display
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL condisplay window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
save time change.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SETUP Button

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.

SET/RND Button — To Set The Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

Buttons 1 - 6

Inserting Compact Disc(s)
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
stations).
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
DISC/AUX Button
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect® 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

RW/FF

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

AM/FM Button

Supported Media (Disc Types)

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ranfiles properly and may be unable to play the file nordomly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extenexceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis- extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
play.)
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension)
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension)
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
•
•

•

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3

Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32

MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3

24, 22.05, 16

Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8

Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.

LIST Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

INFO Button — CD Mode For MP3 Play
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

System Activation
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
ignition is OFF).
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welEquipped
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
Refer to “Uconnect® Phone” for further details.
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
Equipped
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)

Selecting Uconnect® Multimedia (Satellite) Mode

Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
Please have the following information available when CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
calling:
mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID).
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
the radio to exit this screen.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
Operating Instructions — Uconnect® Multimedia
button a second time.
(Satellite) Mode
INFO Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaACC position to operate the radio.
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availSEEK Buttons
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next additional three seconds will make the radio display the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will to normal display).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel. SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.
RW/FF

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265

SET Button — To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console
or glove compartment.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect® Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
etc.) information on the radio display.
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR
button and say ⬙Next Track.⬙

To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and
access a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
say ⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB.⬙ Once in the iPod®/USB/
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track.⬙
MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button
Play Mode
long enough will jump to the beginning of the current
track.
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
holding the FF>> button.
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
onds.
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269

during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track.⬙

SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.

• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
⬙Shuffle Off.⬙ If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off.⬙

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod®/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first ten seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay
in updating the information on the radio display may
be noticeable.

• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom of
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclocksame PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
wise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external USB device:
• Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item
to be selected and press the TUNE control knob. This
• Preset 1 – Playlists
will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271

device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.

WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.

• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)

CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on the
radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Streaming Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.

Previous Track

Selecting A Different Audio Device

Browse

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.

1. Press the PHONE button to begin.

Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and following the beep, say Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then say ⬙Select Audio Devices.⬙
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
Next Track
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
track on your cellular phone.
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273

proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
ing substantial increases in component and system effi- touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Features” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understandciency levels.
ing Your Instrument Panel”.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichanThe Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to nel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source. audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
The GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure mode.
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set autodynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
matically. Fader control is available in surround mode
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplibut should be set to the center position for optimal
fier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround performance.
surround sound processing.
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)

Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275

The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
player.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.

CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
Automatic Temperature Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Operation of the system is quite simple.
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
Turn the Mode Control knob (right knob) and the Blower system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Control knob (left knob) to AUTO.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
occupants only.
NOTE:
Automatic Operation

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
Dial in the temperature you would
without affecting automatic operation.
like the system to maintain by rotating
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
the Temperature Control knob (center
AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
knob). Once the comfort level is seto flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
lected, the system will maintain that
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
level automatically using the heating
air conditioning is not necessary.
system. Should the desired comfort
level require air conditioning, the system will automati- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
cally make the adjustment.
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.

Manual Operation

This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
Blower Control
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
For full automatic operation or for
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
automatic blower operation, turn the
rotating the Blower Control knob (left knob).
blower knob to the AUTO position. In
manual mode there are seven blower NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
speeds that can be individual selected. Operation Chart that follows for details.
In off position the blower will shut off.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (right knob) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel
side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. • Mix
These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
for maximum airflow to the rear.
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

• Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxithere is a difference in temperature between the upper
mum blower and temperature settings for best windand lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
shield and side window defrosting.
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during
sunny but cool conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281

• Air Conditioner Control

NOTE:

Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in defrost mode in order to
the Mode control dial. Press this butimprove window clearing. Recirculation will be diston a second time to turn OFF the air
abled automatically if these modes are selected.
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
manual compressor operation is selected.
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
• Recirculation Control
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
The system will automatically control recircuinterior air to condense on windows and hamper
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
Control button will put the system in recircuRecirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
lation mode. This can be used when outside
Attempting to use the recirculation while in defrost
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
and then turn off.
the control button to illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips

Vacation Storage

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
tions.
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroWindow Fogging
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly recoolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
Winter Operation
rainy or humid weather.
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
is not recommended because it may cause window
long periods as fogging may occur.
fogging.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283

Side Window Demisters

A/C Air Filter

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from
entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from
outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service
information or see your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.

Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions While In Manual Override

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .299
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .290

▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .299

▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .291

▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped . . . . . . .292

▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293

▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296

䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .299

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .306

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵
䡵
䡵

䡵

▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .306 䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .322
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .322
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .327
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .327
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .331
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .343
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .351
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .359
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .361
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .362
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .367
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission) . . .372

▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . .373

▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .379

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373

▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .374

▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375

▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .376

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385

䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .378

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .393

䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING! (Continued)

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.

WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.

WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ — If Equipped

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ Key Fob is in the passenger
compartment.

Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Installing And Removing The ENGINE
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the START/STOP Button
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat Installing The Button
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.

2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
the engine starting, press the button again.
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
accelerator pedal.
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Manual Transmission Only
Normal Starting
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Automatic Transmission Only
Removing The Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the 3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
Starting” procedure.
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
the engine starting, release the button.
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “VEHICLE NOT IN
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
PARK” message and the engine will remain running.
accelerator pedal.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
could roll.
START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
Only
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
Only

NOTE:

• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE
position.
START/STOP button.
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and then
the engine is not running.
apply the parking brake.
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position until
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
Or NEUTRAL Position)

4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).

The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)

1. Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start

WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only

Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob With
Integrated Key)

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.

CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Six-Speed Manual Transmission
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
WARNING!
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one vehicle unattended without having the parking
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
especially on an incline.
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Manual Shifter

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.

The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.

CAUTION!

Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you may result in transmission damage.
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
from a standing position.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

Recommended Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recominhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
mended shift speed chart.
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
SHIFT SPEEDS
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
Axle
1-4
4-5
5-6
for Keyless Enter-N-Go™), as compared to the ignition
Ratio
LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-NGo™). This is normal operation of the transmission
3.73
mph
20
25
42
reverse inhibitor system.
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
(67)
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
3.91

mph
(km/h)

20
(32)

37
(59)

48
(77)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmission is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first
gear to second gear. This is to help you get the best
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayed
during these times.

When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is displayed, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from
first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission
to fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to
another forward gear.
Downshifting
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downshift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
grade.

WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.

• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.

CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.

(Continued)

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

WARNING! (Continued)
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission

The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
before the ignition switch can be turned to the full OFF lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
(key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed
from the ignition when the ignition is in the full OFF The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
position, and the transmission is locked in PARK when- precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
ever the ignition switch is in the full OFF position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or
Shift Lever
tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles Gear Ranges
(-/+) (if equipped), will manually select the transmission
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
brake.
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
especially important when the engine is cold.
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffithe ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
OFF position first.
grade.
PARK (P)
NOTE:

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.

WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine off, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the full OFF (key removal) position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

CAUTION!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.

• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVE (D)

SPORT — If Equipped

This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.

Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

To toggle between normal mode and SPORT mode, press
the SPORT switch on the instrument panel.
Transmission Limp Home Mode

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomto be driven to an authorized dealer for service without mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
damaging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
1. Stop the vehicle.
Overdrive Operation
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
ditions are present:
5. Restart the engine.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
operation.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

AUTOSTICK®
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick® mode,
the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) is
manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, or
the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below.

• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxiWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
mum engine speed is reached.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
when maximum engine speed is reached. The transDRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheelmission will upshift only when commanded by the
mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
Operation

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

• The transmission will automatically downshift as the To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
display the current gear.
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
pedal.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. On
the center console, there is a “SPORT” button that when
pressed the vehicle will enter “SPORT” mode.

Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
SPORT Button
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Flowing/Rising Water
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Traction

3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.

WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

Shallow Standing Water

(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(Continued)

POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electrohydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capability.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.

steering maneuvers may have occurred, which caused an
over temperature condition in the power steering system.
You will lose power steering assistance momentarily
until the over temperature condition no longer exists.
Once driving conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light turns off.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM”
message and a flashing icon are displayed on NOTE:
the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operaneeds to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understeering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
and during parking maneuvers.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP - SEE • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
OWNER’S MANUAL” message and an icon are disservice.
played on the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full • This light only shows that the parking brake is apfunctionality after a battery disconnect.
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless
Enter-N-Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.

Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Automatic Transmission Parking Brake

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.

In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic wheel lock-up.
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
by increased pedal travel during application, greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential axle.
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

BRAKE SYSTEM

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains soABS is activated during braking under certain road or
phisticated electronic equipment that may be susstopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inceptible to interference caused by improperly include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
stalled or high output radio transmitting
debris, or panic stops.
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
You also may experience the following when the brake
such equipment should be performed by qualified
system goes into anti-lock:
professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
short time after the stop)
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
• Brake pedal pulsations
slow down or stop.
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.

If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
accurate signals for the computer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
possible.
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrauIf both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
required.

WARNING!

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on all models.

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction Control System (TCS)

Brake Assist System (BAS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.

This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appliA feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances.
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” or ⬙Full Off⬙ unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this is released, the BAS is deactivated.
section for more information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 329

WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)

during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual
transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic
transmissions.

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backthe level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:

WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90
seconds.
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

Disabling/Enabling HSA

3. Apply the parking brake.

If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

4. Start the engine.
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
within 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
times.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 331

8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
additional half-turn to the right.
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
back to the ON position. If the sequence was combrake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Inthe condition of oversteer or understeer.
dicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
is disabled.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
to it’s previous setting.
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.

WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

332 STARTING AND OPERATING

ESC Operating Modes

WARNING! (Continued)
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.

The ESC system has two or three available operating
modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 333

The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will illuminate.
To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC
Off” switch and the ⬙ESC Off Indicator Light⬙ will turn
off.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the limited wheel spin feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. The “ESC OFF” message may appear

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily press
the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining

WARNING! (Continued)
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 335

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/ NOTE:
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on moLight” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
ON/RUN position.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authocycled off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially Tire Markings
off or full off.

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

NOTE:

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 339

EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 341

EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard

Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 343

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.

5
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information
Placard

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

344 STARTING AND OPERATING

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 345

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
the weight referenced here.
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occubeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
capacity calculated in step 4.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 347

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

Safety

WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety

WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

• Economy

(Continued)

• Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 349

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both underinflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumpTire Inflation Pressures
tion.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

At least once a month:

mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 351

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

Radial Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:

WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

352 STARTING AND OPERATING

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
additional information.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme- on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. For more information, contact a auservice description (Load Index and Speed Code).
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all
Tire Types
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
All Season Tires — If Equipped
the tire sidewall.
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.

Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 353

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
tire inflation pressures.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid mode.
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be See the tire pressure monitoring section for more inforpoorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- mation.
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
tire rotation pattern.
spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped

CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 355

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.

WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
Replacement Tires
those of the original wheels.
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 359

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P235/55R18 or P225/60R18
tire with a Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6
low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended.

WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 361

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving, reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
mended cold placard pressure.
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 363

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.”

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 365

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will
Base System
be displayed and a chime will sound when tire pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
is low in one or more of the four active road tires. Should
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
readings to the receiver module.
pressure value. Once the system receives the updated tire
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the pressures, the system will automatically update and the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly “TPM Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn
and to maintain the proper pressure.
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
The TPMS consists of the following components:
to receive this information.
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors, and
• TPM Telltale Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

Service TPMS Warning

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will Vehicles with Compact Spare
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
the compact spare tire.
system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
will sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
and a “LOW TIRE” message will be displayed for a
the TPM sensors.
minimum of five seconds.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
materials that may block radio wave signals.
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
wheel housings.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
sound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 367

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.

The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE”
readings to the receiver module.
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing. An
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message will also be displayed in the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
EVIC display.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

368 STARTING AND OPERATING

will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (Tire Pressure Monitor Display
-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible is not being received.
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as
shown in the ⬙Inflate Tire to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 369

longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

370 STARTING AND OPERATING

message is then followed with a graphic display with 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
the compact spare tire.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
display a flashing pressure value and the ⬙Inflate Tire
the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of
to XX⬙ message.
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
Vehicles with Compact Spare

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 371

low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active FUEL REQUIREMENTS
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
3.6L Engine — If Equipped
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
This engine is designed to meet all emisGeneral Information
sions regulations and provide excellent
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
fuel economy and performance when usRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasofollowing conditions:
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of
premium
gasoline
is not recommended, as it will not
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
• This device must accept any interference received, engines.
including interference that may cause undesired opLight spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
eration.
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
ing licenses:
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiUnited States
MRXC4W4MA4
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
before considering service for the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
5.7L Engine (With Automatic Transmission)
The 3.6L and 5.7L engine (with automatic
transmission) is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.

The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 373

5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission)

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

The 5.7L engine (with manual transmission) is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.

CAUTION!

Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.

Do not use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems and may damage critical fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E-85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

• Change the engine oil and oil filter.

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso- • Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
engine controller memory.
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Warranty.
exposure to E-85 fuel.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
• Operate in a lean mode.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• Poor engine performance.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
E-85 perform the following:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 375

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 377

CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

Fuel Filler Cap

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

VEHICLE LOADING

• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear

The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

Vehicle Certification Label

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Name of manufacturer
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
• Month and year of manufacture
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading

Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading

The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 381

NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed Common Towing Definitions
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
and GAWRs.
you in understanding the following information:
TRAILER TOWING

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
hicles used for trailer towing.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temManual Transmission — If Equipped
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

382 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

Tongue Weight (TW)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
and trailer when weighed in combination.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Frontal Area
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica- maximum width of the front of a trailer.
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
Trailer Sway Control
information.
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
WARNING!
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fricIt is important that you do not exceed the maximum tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 383

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.

steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. Weight Distribution hitched are recommended for loads in excess of
5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

WARNING!

Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 385

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic

Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
12 sq ft (1.11 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area

Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in your bumper or trailer hitch.
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Trailer And Tongue Weight

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.

CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.

• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 387

CAUTION! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur
that may be difficult for the driver to control. You
could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.

(Continued)

WARNING!

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Towing Requirements — Tires

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 389

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.

CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION! (Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

Four-Pin Connector

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 1 — Female Pins
wiring harness.
2 — Male Pin
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.

3 — Ground

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn

STARTING AND OPERATING 391

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes

5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps

NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necesSchedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
conditions allow.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Cooling System
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to City Driving
maximize fuel efficiency.
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
AutoStick®
• When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the Highway Driving
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
Reduce speed.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 393

Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Dolly Tow
On Trailer

Wheels OFF The
Ground
None

Front
Rear
All

Manual Transmission
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (105 km/h)
maximum speed
Not Recommended
Not Recommended
OK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Automatic Transmission

NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
Not Recommended
OK

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

CAUTION!

Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

STARTING AND OPERATING 395

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

CAUTION!

Vehicles with a manual transmission may be flat towed
(with all four wheels on the ground) under the following
conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph
(105 km/h).
• There is no limitation on towing distance.

Manual transmission vehicles may also be towed using a
vehicle trailer (with all four wheels off the ground).
Use of a towing dolly is not recommended, as vehicle
damage may occur.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .412
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .399

▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .413

䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .400

▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415

▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .401

▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422

䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411

䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .429

▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
panel.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.

WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 401

TIREFIT Storage

TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation

The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.

6
TIREFIT Components
TIREFIT Location

1
2
3
4

—
—
—
—

Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)

402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Using The Power Button

Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode

Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the
Power Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT
kit.

Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and TIREFIT Usage Precautions
turn to this position to inject the TIRE- • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire. Use
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
selecting this mode.
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Hose Replacement”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403

the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only inuse. Always replace these components immediately at
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

404 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.

• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405

WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children.
If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.

kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary
to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.

Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT

(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:

(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.

1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.

2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire.
valve stem.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREFIT kit.

Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
and not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
On the TIREFIT kit.

2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
available. Make sure the engine is running before
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407

NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).

latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).

If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”

(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.

TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409

(E) After Driving:

If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:

Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
service center.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
ment”.
bottle is locked into place.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
using the TIREFIT service kit.
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
vehicle.
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
of it accordingly.
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous- properly calibrated torque wrench.
ing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411

Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque

**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size

130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)

M14 x 1.50

Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm

**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

6
Wheel Mounting Surface

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

Torque Patterns

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413

WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.

6
Opening The Access Panel

NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Spare Tire Fastener

4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.

Jack Fastener

6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.

3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK (automatic transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission).
5. Turn OFF the ignition.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
tire, block the left rear wheel.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
WARNING!
being jacked.
Preparations For Jacking

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jacking And Changing A Tire

WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.

Jack Warning Label
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417

CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.

2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.

Jack Engagement Locations

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419

WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Mounting Spare Tire

420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
10. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper lug nut torque.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
“Starting And Operating” for additional warnings,
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
tightening down the fastener.
use, and operation.

NOTE:

8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421

Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.

2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
lug nuts.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
WARNING!
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
result in personal injury.
precautions.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Table for proper lug nut torque.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.

WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start

Remote Battery Posts Locations

The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk. 1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the 2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
engine compartment for jump-starting.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423

WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

WARNING!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
charged battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
in the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

CAUTION!

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

CAUTION!

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the transmission overheating and failure. Allow the enfront wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or FIRST least one minute after every five rocking-motion
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the enNOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
gine.
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427

CAUTION!

WARNING!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic
transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located to the right of
the shift lever).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

Shift Lever Override Access Cover

5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
hole, and push and hold the override release lever
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
down.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow

Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow
Flatbed

Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE

Front
Rear
ALL

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MANUAL TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (105 km/h)
max speed

NOT RECOMMENDED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD

430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.

CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431

Automatic Transmission

CAUTION!

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condiIf the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
tions:
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). PARK for towing.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Manual Transmission

CAUTION!

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 65 mph
(105 km/h).
• There is no limitation on towing distance.
If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .436

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .438

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .448

䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .465
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .466
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484

▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .485
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .489
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435

䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .492

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery
Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
Post)

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick

7 — Air Cleaner Filter

5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery
Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery
Post)

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover

7 — Engine Oil Fill

5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Air Cleaner Filter

8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

CAUTION!

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439

Trip Odometer button to turn off the message. If the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
problem continues, the message will appear the next time system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacethe vehicle is started.
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
may also turn on the MIL.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
PROGRAMS
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass following:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
start this test over.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
system is ready for testing.
of a normal bulb check.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441

available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.

CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443

Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine

Change Engine Oil

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.

CAUTION!

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol

Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine

MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to Chrysler
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
This symbol means that the oil has Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
been certified by the American temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Petroleum Institute (API). The starting and vehicle fuel economy.
manufacturer only recommends
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
API Certified engine oils.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445

Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent such as
should not be used.
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem- Materials Added To Engine Oil
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- performance may be impaired by supplemental addiment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- tives.
tion.
Synthetic Engine Oils
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomSAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomoperation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Oper- are followed.
ating” for further information.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

WARNING!

Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Battery Location

448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
of each warm season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt
tension should also be checked at this time.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449

WARNING!

CAUTION!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.

Access Door

2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451

Filter Access Cover

3. Remove the used filter.

A/C Air Filter

5. Close the filter access cover.

4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication

Windshield Wiper Blades

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453

The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
equipped).
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
WARNING!
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
Adding Washer Fluid

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.

CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)

(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455

CAUTION! (Continued)
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
motion.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System

WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position (OFF position for
Keyless Enter-N-Go™). The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position (RUN position for
Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.

Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing maintenance intervals.
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE- Selection Of Coolant
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

(Continued)

Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS-12106.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanlocal authorized dealer.
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the engine coolant (antifreeze) level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing enIf an examination of your engine compartment shows no
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
condenser clean.
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emisrequired, the cooling system should be pressure tested
sions.
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a Brake System
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS- In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protec- system components should be inspected periodically.
tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo- Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
nents.
maintenance intervals.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463

WARNING!

Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.

Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.

Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

WARNING! (Continued)

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Clutch Hydraulic System — Manual Transmission
(If Equipped)
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.

Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Change Transmission Fluid

CAUTION!

If contaminated with water, change the fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467

leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmisadversely affect seals.
sion damage.

CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.

CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Axle

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Fluid Level Check

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geoground will improve the accuracy of the fluid level graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
reading.
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contamihole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
Change Axle Fluid
underbody protection.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The following maintenance recommendations will enable
maintenance intervals.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

CAUTION!

Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
the owner.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior Care

WARNING!

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.

CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft with the cupholder in the center console.
cloth.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475

Integrated Power Module

WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.

The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment. This module contains fuses and relays.

7
Integrated Power Module

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• When installing the integrated power module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the integrated power module and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

(Continued)

Cavity
1
2

Cartridge Fuse
—
—

Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp Natural

3
4
5

—
—
—

25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Washer Motor
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/NGS
Module Feed (Batt)
Ignition Run/Start
EGR Solenoid/Alternator
Powertrain Control Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477

Cavity
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
—
50 Amp Red
—
—
—
—
—

Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
30 Amp Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Ignition Coils/Injectors
Headlamp Washer Relay – If Equipped
Starter
—
Windshield Wiper
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan Lo/High
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Motor
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—

478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
21
22

Cartridge Fuse
—
—

Mini-Fuse
—
—

Description
—
—

Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.

Rear Power Distribution Center

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479

CAUTION!

CAUTION! (Continued)

• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.

(Continued)

Cavity
1

Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow

40 Amp Green

Mini-Fuse
—

—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Cavity 1 of the Rear Power Distribution
Center contains a black IOD fuse needed
for vehicle processing during assembly.
The service replacement part is a 60 Amp
yellow cartridge fuse.
Integrated Power Module (IPM)

480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
3
4
5
6
7
8

Cartridge Fuse
—
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
—
—
—

Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue

9
10
11 *
12 *
13 *
14

—
—
—
—
—
—

20 Amp Yellow
25 Amp Natural
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
Heated Seats – If Equipped
Fuel Pump
Audio Amplifier – If Equipped
Diagnostic Link Connector (DLC)/
Wireless Control Module (WCM)/Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN)
Power Outlet
Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
—
—
—
AC Heater Control/Cluster/Security Module – If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481

Cavity
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Active Damper – If Equipped
Heated Seat Module – If Equipped
Instrument Cluster
Cigar Lighter (Instrument Panel)
Stop Lights
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run, AC Heater Control/
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity
29

Cartridge Fuse
—

Mini-Fuse
5 Amp Tan

—

10 Amp Red

31
32
33
34
35

—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
5 Amp Tan

—

25 Amp Natural

37
38

—
—

15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Description
Cluster/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
Door Modules/Power Mirrors/Steering
Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
Antenna Module – If Equipped/Power
Mirrors
Hands-Free Phone – If Equipped/Radio/
Amplifier Feed
Transmission
Cargo Light/Vehicle Information Module
– If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483

Cavity
39
40

Cartridge Fuse
—
—

Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Orange

41
42
43
44

—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue

—
—
—
—

Description
Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
Auto Inside Rearview Mirror/Heated
Seats – If Equipped/Switch Bank
—
Front Blower Motor
Rear Window Defroster
Amplifier/Sunroof – If Equipped

*Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses (circuit experience temporary or permanent loss of these sysbreakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized tems, see your authorized dealer for service.
dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch are fused by
the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The passenger
seat switch is fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in
cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power window
switch, and the passenger power window switch are
fused by the 25 Amp circuit breaker in cavity 13. If you
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE STORAGE

Interior Bulbs

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.

Bulb Number
W5W

Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Read578
ing Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at AuthoPocket/Cupholder
rized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485

Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License

BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
D1S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
H13
3157A
PSX24W (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168
3057K
3057K
168
921
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
168

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
1. Remove the front/rear side marker. Use a fiber stick or
an authorized dealer for service.
similar tool to gently pry the lamp on the outboard
side to disengage the clip.

WARNING!

A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.

NOTE: If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material
is placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
scratch the paint.
2. Rotate the bulb’s socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replaceNOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
ment bulb.
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the front/rear side marker.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487

Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Using a screwdriver, remove the tail lamp retainer.

Tail Lamp Fasteners

4. Pull back the trunk liner.

Tail Lamp Retainer

5. Remove the remaining fasteners from the back of the
tail lamp assembly.

3. Remove the fasteners from the back of the tail lamp 6. Pull the tail lamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

10. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
11. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
12. Reinstall the tail lamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
13. Reinstall tail lamp retainer.

Removing Tail Lamp Assembly

7. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
8. Disconnect the electrical connector.
9. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail lamp assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489

Center Tail/Backup Lamp
See your authorized dealer for bulb replacement.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
Reinstall Tail Lamp Retainer

14. Close the trunk.

2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.

Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491

FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines
19 Gallons
72 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
11.1 Quarts
10.5 Liters
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine
14.7 Quarts
13.9 Liters
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine

Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®,
and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493

Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection (3.6L and 5.7L Engine – Automatic
Transmission)
Fuel Selection (5.7L Engine – Manual Transmission)

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap
0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
91 Octane

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle – 3.6L Engine
Rear Axle – 5.7L Engine

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission. We recommend MOPAR® ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic Fluid or equivalent meeting
MS-11655, such as Fuchs EG ZH 3044 or Pentosin CHF 11s.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W140
(API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90
(API GL-5) with MOPAR® Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 N
C
E

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .496

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intermiles (805 km).
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497 M

Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

A
I
N
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following T
E
page for the required maintenance intervals.
N
A
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
N
Change Indicator System:
C
E

Required Maintenance Intervals.

• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled service
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals and replace if
necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped), add as necessary.

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

2
32,000

M 498 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
T
Mileage or time passed
E
(whichever comes first)
N
A
N
Or Years:
C
E
Or Kilometers:

X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Inspect the brake linings, replace
as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes.
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning
filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine). **

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 499 M

X
X

X
X
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

X
X

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine). **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Change the manual transmission
fluid (if equipped) if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
Most of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C),
driving in dusty conditions, or
stop and go driving.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Or Years:
Or Kilometers:

20,000

Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)

32,000

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 M

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

8
X

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter.
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, offroad, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

M 502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503 M

WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.

A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .507

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .508
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .508
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509

▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .512

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

506 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 507

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment

Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 509

Mexico, D. F.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Service Contract

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

510 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.

WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 511

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513

Call toll free at:

Treadwear

• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

516 INDEX

About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .446
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 517

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .96
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .28 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .276
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

518 INDEX

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .439
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Child Restraints

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .87
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .81
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 519

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.265
.227
.202
.202
.184
.509
.460
.456
.458
.491
.456
.460
.457
.461
.461
.460
.460
.457
.468

Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

520 INDEX

Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .227
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .478
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .172

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .211
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .221
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .439
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 521

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Filler Location Fuel . . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal .
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . .
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.446
.283
.446
.446

.
.
.
.

.399
.101
.166
.296

522 INDEX

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .494
. . . . . . . . . . .491
. . . . . . . . . . .101
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.467
.463
.456
.442
.492
.164
.157
.426
.371
.376
.375
.373
.227
.373
.376

Gasoline . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . .
Methanol . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . .
Requirements . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . .
Specifications . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.371
.210
.375
.373
.371
.371
.227
.492
.491
.376
.227
.227
.377
.474

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.185
.376
.373
.371

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

INDEX 523

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .

Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.399
.485
.162
.472
.162
.166
.164
.162
.166
.161
.162
.453
.453
.155
.155
.112
.152
.299
.166

524 INDEX

Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .329 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .169
. . . . . . . . . . . .384 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . . . . . . . . .185 iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
. . . . . . . . . . . .159

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472

Jacking Instructions .
Jack Location . . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.416
.413
.412
.421

Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Additional Key Fobs . .
Programming Additional Transmitters
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.

.20
.19
.19
.16
.36
.23
.12

INDEX 525

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . .
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . .
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . .
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.162
.335
.216
.485
.489
.166
.210
.163
.165
.211
.213
.101
.164
.399
.161
.164
.162
.161
.166

526 INDEX

High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .220
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .168
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .220

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .210
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 527

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .220
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

528 INDEX

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .344
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .197

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 529

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.351
.460
.276
.274
.201
.176
.157

Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .274
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

530 INDEX

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 531

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .220
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

532 INDEX

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .274
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .58
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.210
.171
.276
.211
.171
.162
.343
.400
.336
.101
.357
.348
.359
.412
.354

INDEX 533

General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.348
.351
.349
.412
.357
.343
.362
.218
.513
.351
.358
.361
.336
.337
.352
.413
.356
.388
.356

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . .
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . .

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.336
.385
.159
.381
.127
.429
.385
.393
.385
.127
.393
.316
.328
.381
.392
.384
.386
.391
.385

534 INDEX

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .28
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Uconnect® 130
Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode . . . . . . . .248
Operating Instructions CD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Operating Instructions Radio Mode . . . . . . . . . .240
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .265
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)
Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INDEX 535

Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Voice Command
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .210
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510

Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal
adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection
should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy
or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal
may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

2014 Challenger

2014
OWNER’S MANUAL

Chrysler Group LLC
14D491-126-AC

I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:

Third Edition

Printed in U.S.A.

Challenger

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : 3rd Edition
Create Date                     : 2013:11:25 07:54:50-05:00
Keywords                        : 1570554
Modify Date                     : 2015:07:02 11:50:50-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 81.157285, 2014/12/12-00:43:15
Metadata Date                   : 2015:07:02 11:50:50-05:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Macintosh)
Instance ID                     : uuid:e32d1b75-0315-456f-bc34-73917f79a696
Original Document ID            : xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Document ID                     : xmp.id:FF7F117407206811822A9B04A680A10E
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:FE7F117407206811822A9B04A680A10E
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:FE7F117407206811822A9B04A680A10E
Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:B8BC9D61201E11688507CD34934C9F05
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Macintosh)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2013:11:25 07:54:51-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2014 Dodge Challenger Owner's Manual
Description                     : 14D491-126-AC
Creator                         : 3rd Edition
Subject                         : 1570554
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Trapped                         : False
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 539

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

2014 Dodge Challenger Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation